2006 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M
................................................................ 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the
damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Six-Way Power Driver Seat
If your vehicle has a manual driver seat height adjuster,
it is located on the outboard side of the seat near the
front of the seat cushion. To raise the seat, move
the lever upward repeatedly until the seat is at the
desired height. To lower the seat, move the lever
downward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired
height.
If your vehicle has this feature, the control is located on
the outboard side of the driver’s seat. To adjust the
seat do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front portion of the seat by
sliding the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear portion of the seat by sliding
the rear of the control up or down.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the knob is
located on the front of the
driver seat lower cushion
on the inboard side.
If your vehicle has
heated seats, the switches
are located on the
center console of the
instrument panel above
the shift lever.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the lumbar support.
Press the switch, nearest to the seat, once to turn the
heated seat on to the high setting. Both indicator
lights will be lit. Press the switch a second time to turn
the heated seat to the low setting. One indicator
light will be lit. Press the switch a third time to turn the
heated seat off.
The ignition must be on for the heated seats to operate.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
Driver’s Seat with Manual Recline and Manual
Height Adjuster shown
To adjust the seatback on the driver’s seat, lift the lever
on the rear outboard side of the seat and move the
seatback to the desired position. Then release the lever
to lock the seatback in place.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
Passenger Seat with Folding Seatback Option shown
To adjust the seatback on the front passenger’s seat,
lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat and move
the seatback to the desired position. Then release
the lever to lock the seatback in place. If your front
passenger’s seat is a flat folding seat, you must
fully raise the lever to disengage the seatback.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Folding Seatback
The front passenger’s seatback may fold flat.
{CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo
is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object toward a person.
This could cause severe injury or even death.
Secure objects away from the area in which an
airbag would inflate. For more information,
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
{CAUTION:
Things you put on this seatback can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash. Remove or secure all items
before driving.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Lower the head restraint all the way.
2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it.
Slide the seat as far back as it will go and release
the bar. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure it is locked into place.
4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks in the
folded position.
5. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
3. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard side
of the seat, up fully and fold the seatback forward
until it disengages.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
Rear Seats
1. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard side
of the seat, up fully and push up on the seatback.
Split Folding Rear Seat
2. Continue raising the seatback until the seatback
re-engages.
The rear split bench seatbacks have three available
positions — folded forward, upright, or partially reclined.
Both of the seatbacks can be moved to any of the
three positions independent of the other seatback
position. The rear bench seat can also be moved
forward and rearward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
The recliner lever is also used to recline the seatback
while a passenger is seated. See Reclining Seatbacks
on page 1-5.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fold the seatback down, do the following:
1. Ensure all three of the safety belts are unbuckled
and the front seatbacks are not reclined.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
2. Lift the lever located on the top of the seatback to
release the seatback.
3. Fold the seatback forward to the desired position.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
Safety Belts
1. Lift and hold the lever located on top of the
seatback.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then release the lever
when the seatback is in the desired position.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
To slide the entire seat forward or rearward, do the
following:
1. Lift and hold the release bar located under the front
of the seat cushion to unlock the seat.
{CAUTION:
2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
3. Release the bar.
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
4. Try to move the seat back and forth to ensure the
seat is locked in place.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
{CAUTION:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your
everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Driver Position
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle your
belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons (A) together and
move the height adjuster to
the desired position.
After you move the height
adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it up or
down without squeezing
the release buttons to
make sure it has locked
into position.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for the
following.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate
up the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the
guideloop.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
For outboard seating positions, when the safety belt
is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on
the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, place the guide over the belt, and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide available for each outboard
passenger position in the rear seat. Here is how to
install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the back
of the seatback.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of elastic cord exposed.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use
it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child
seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could
cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
{CAUTION:
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
page 1-28. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint the belts provide.
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
{CAUTION:
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
Infants always should be secured in
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
appropriate infant restraints.
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
{CAUTION:
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,
the child has to be secured within the child restraint.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint.
You may find these instructions on the restraint
itself or in a booklet, or both.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
A shield may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped
shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad
which rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached
to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of the
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch.
The five-point harness system has two shoulder
straps, two hip straps, and a crotch strap.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We, therefore, recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat. Here is why:
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in
the rear seat, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint or the
size of the child restraint, you may not be able to
access certain safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors
for additional passengers or child restraints.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configurations for Use of
Two Child Restraints
Configurations for Use of
Three Child Restraints
A. Child restraint using
A. Child restraint or
LATCH
occupant using
safety belt
B. Occupant prohibited
A. Occupant prohibited
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
B. No occupant
recommended
C. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains
how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Top Tether Anchor
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Rear Seat
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the
top tether in this position.
Each rear seating position has exposed metal anchors
located in the crease between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
The top tether anchors for each rear seating position
are located on the back of the rear seatback.
You may need to adjust the rear compartment storage
panel/cover in the rear cargo area to access the
anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
for additional information.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with
that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system is designed to make installation of child
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
A. Passenger’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
C. Driver’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
anchor location.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. You may need to adjust the rear compartment
storage panel/cover in the rear cargo area to
access the anchors. See Rear Compartment
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether around
the head restraint.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether under the head
restraint and in between the
head restraint posts.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top tether to
the top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that
came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety
belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger. For outboard seating
positions, when the safety belt is not in use, slide the
latch plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch
plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt,
near the upper anchor on the side wall.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in
a rear seat.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
There is no top tether anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
a top tether.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this
position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt
back into the retractor. You may find it helpful to use
your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger. When the safety
Even if you do not have a right front passenger seat in
your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag in
the right side of the instrument panel. Do not place cargo
in front of this airbag.
belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching
on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
{CAUTION:
Airbag System
Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. In a
crash, an inflating airbag might force that
object toward a person. This could cause
severe injury or even death. Secure objects
away from the area in which an airbag would
inflate. For more information, see Where Are
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have roof-mounted side impact airbags.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are available for the
driver and the passenger seated directly behind the
driver and for the right front passenger and the
passenger seated directly behind that passenger.
If your vehicle has side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on the
ceiling near the driver’s and right front passenger’s
window.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
And, for some unrestrained occupants, frontal
airbags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful airbags have
provided in the past.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed to
work with safety belts but do not replace them.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover
or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or
not there is an airbag for that person.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rollover,
rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
and the person seated directly behind the driver,
it is in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, if your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never secure
anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing
the rope or tiedown through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an inflating side
impact airbag will be blocked. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the right front
passenger and the person seated directly behind that
passenger, it is in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level for
the reduced deployment is about 11 to 16 mph
(17 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may or may not have side impact airbags.
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed “threshold level.”
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal or
near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage to a
vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the
vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the
vehicle slows down. For side impact airbags, inflation is
determined by the location and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger. For vehicles
with side impact airbags, there are also airbag modules
in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.
side collisions for side impact airbags.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even realize the
airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags
deflate more slowly and may still be at least partially
inflated minutes after the vehicle comes to rest.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
a short time. These components include the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. For vehicles with roof-mounted side impact
airbags, the ceiling of your vehicle near the side
windows, and the vehicle metal near the rear windows
and tailgate may be warm. The parts of the airbag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but not
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and
dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from
seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors and turn the interior dome lamp on
and flash the parklamps on and off when the airbags
inflate (if battery power is available.) You can lock
the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using
the door lock and interior lamp controls.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.
Your dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts.
The service manual for your vehicle covers the
need to replace other parts.
{CAUTION:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an airbag
when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the airbag system.
Be sure to follow proper service procedures,
and make sure the person performing work for
you is qualified to do so.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
page 7-2.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering (if equipped) on the ceiling
near the side windows, the airbag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the airbag
module in the steering wheel, both the airbag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag, or side impact airbag module
and ceiling covering for roof-mounted side impact
airbags (if equipped.) Do not open or break the
airbag coverings.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
One key is used for the ignition and all of the locks.
Key code information can be obtained by your dealer.
These code numbers can be used to make new
keys. Additional keys that are needed can be made at
any retail service facility provided you have the key code
information. Store this information in a safe place, but
not in your vehicle.
Have extra keys made. Your service parts department
can make extra keys for you.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to
for more information.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Remote Keyless Entry System
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
The remote keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement” and “Resynchronization” under
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
K (Unlock): Press this button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter one time to unlock the driver’s
door. The interior lights will go on and the headlamps
will flash three times. The interior lights will stay on
for 20 seconds or until the key is turned in the ignition.
Press the button again within five seconds to unlock
the rest of the doors. The unlock button also disarms the
content theft-deterrent system.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the doors
from about 26 feet (8 m) away using the remote keyless
entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Q (Lock): Press this
button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter
one time to lock the doors.
The headlamps will
L(Panic Alarm): Press the button with the horn
symbol when the ignition is turned off. The horn
will sound and the parking lamps and dome lamp will
flash for up to two minutes. To stop the panic alarm,
press this button again.
flash once. This also
arms the content
The remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
arm/disarm the content theft-deterrent system. Your
vehicle’s theft-deterrent system can be programmed to
three different modes. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-13
theft-deterrent system.
If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering or
exiting the vehicle, you can shut it off by pressing
the lock or unlock button once or the panic alarm
button twice.
Pressing the lock button two times within three seconds
will lock the doors. The headlamps will flash twice
and the horn chirps.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the transmitter.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil or
similar object to remove the old battery. Do not use
a metal object.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
3. Insert the new battery as the instructions under the
cover indicate.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
If the transmitter does not work, try synchronizing your
transmitter with your receiver. See “Resynchronization”
for more information.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resynchronization
Doors and Locks
This is used to keep the transmitter of the vehicle
communicating with the receiver of the vehicle.
Resynchronization may be required due to the security
method used by this system.
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has an automatic resynchronization
function built into the system. If your transmitter is
not working properly and you have to manually
resynchronize, press the lock and unlock buttons at the
same time for seven seconds while you are near
your vehicle. The doors will lock or unlock, depending
on their starting position. If they do not, contact
your dealer for service.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly and
lock the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are a couple of ways to manually lock or unlock
your vehicle.
Delayed Locking
A chime will sound three times to indicate a door or
liftgate is open when you try to lock the doors with
the remote keyless entry transmitter or the power
door lock switch. The doors will not lock, and the
theft-deterrent system will not arm until all the doors
are closed and five seconds have passed.
From the outside, use the key in the driver’s door.
From the inside, use the lock control on the door.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s doors.
The delayed locking feature can be overridden by
pressing the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, or the door lock switch, a second time.
The doors will lock immediately and when all doors are
closed the theft-deterrent system will arm after
30 seconds.
To get the horn to chirp if a door was open during the
arming process, you must press the lock button on your
transmitter twice after the doors are closed.
K (Unlock): To unlock the doors, press the unlock
symbol.
Q (Lock): Remove the ignition key and press the lock
symbol to lock all of the doors.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Door Lock
Rear Door Security Locks
With this feature, all the doors will automatically lock
when the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P) if
the ignition is in the run position and all doors are
closed. Otherwise, the doors will automatically lock if
the vehicle is going faster than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You must
open the rear doors to
access them.
In the following two situations, all doors will lock
again when:
• The brake pedal is applied, a door is opened and
then closed, and the brake pedal is released.
• A door is opened and closed without the brake
pedal applied while the vehicle is moving faster than
3 mph (5 km/h).
This feature cannot be disabled.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
To set the security locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the lock above the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the horizontal
position.
Your vehicle is programmed to automatically unlock all
doors when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P).
2. Close the door.
To turn this feature on or off, turn the ignition to the run
position and press the unlock part of the power door
lock switch for eight seconds. The horn will chirp once
when this feature is on and twice when it is off.
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open a rear door while the security lock is on,
do the following:
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and only the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure
to remove the key from the ignition when locking
your vehicle.
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the front door power lock switch, or
by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
If the keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the doors
and the key is in the ignition, a chime will sound
three times. All passenger doors will lock, but the
driver’s door will remain unlocked.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it to the vertical
position.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To unlock the liftgate, press the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter twice or use the power
door lock switch.
Liftgate
To lock the liftgate, press the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter or use the power door lock
switch. The liftgate does not have a key lock cylinder.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot
see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you must
drive with the liftgate open or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through the seal between the body and the
liftgate or liftglass:
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle located in the
center of the liftgate.
When closing the liftgate, use the molded handles to
pull the liftgate down. Push the liftgate closed until
it latches.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Climate Control
System” in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. The switch is labeled AUTO.
Press the bottom of the switch part way, and the driver’s
window will open a small amount. Press the switch
down all the way down and release it and the window
will go down automatically.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press and
release the top of the switch.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout
feature to prevent rear seat passengers from operating
the windows. Press the lockout button, located with
the power window switches, to turn the feature on and
off. When the red band on the button is showing,
the lockout feature is off.
The window switches for all doors are located on the
center console. A window switch for each rear window is
located on each rear door.
Sun Visors
To open a window, press the bottom of the switch.
To close a window, press the top of the switch.
To block out glare, swing the sun visor down. You can
also detach the driver’s sun visor from the center
mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side for
greater coverage.
The power windows operate when the ignition is RUN
or ACC (Accessory), or while in Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-16.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors on both
the driver’s and passenger’s side.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Active Arming: The system will arm when the lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed. The security system light will come on steady
for thirty seconds. During this time you can still get
back into the vehicle without triggering the alarm.
Once the light starts flashing the system is armed.
The system will disarm when the unlock button on the
transmitter is pressed.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Passive Arming: The system will arm itself one minute
after the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door
has been opened and closed. If the lock button on the
transmitter is pressed before the minute has passed,
the system will arm immediately. The system will disarm
when the unlock button is pressed.
Your vehicle has a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
Security System Disable: The system will not arm.
The remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
arm/disarm the content theft-deterrent system.
page 2-4. Your vehicle’s theft-deterrent system can be
programmed to three different modes.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering or
exiting the vehicle, you can shut it off by pressing either
the lock or unlock button once on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. The panic alarm button needs to
be pressed twice to turn off the alarm. There is
a ten second pre-alarm grace period indicated by a
rapid beeping. By pressing the transmitter buttons as
indicated above, you can disarm the system before
the horn begins to sound and the exterior lights begin
to flash.
Content Theft-Deterrent Personalization
To change the mode that your vehicle is programmed to,
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC (Accessory).
2. Press the panic alarm button on the transmitter
slowly four times within five seconds.
3. You must complete one of the following within
three seconds to change the mode.
• To select the active arming mode, press the
lock button on the transmitter once within
three seconds. A chime will sound two times to
acknowledge that the active arming mode
has been selected.
If you hear three horn chirps when you press the unlock
button on the transmitter, that means the vehicle’s
alarm was triggered while you were away.
• To select the passive arming mode, press the
lock button on the transmitter twice within
three seconds. A chime will sound three times to
acknowledge that the passive arming mode
has been selected.
• To select the security system disable mode,
press the unlock button on the transmitter
once within three seconds. A chime will sound
one time to acknowledge that the security system
disabled mode has been selected.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passlock®
Your vehicle has the Passlock® theft-deterrent system.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
This light will come on for
the theft-deterent system
and is located on the
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
instrument panel cluster.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the
ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from
START as soon as the engine starts.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this
time. You may also want to check the fuses. See your
dealer for service.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACC (Accessory): This position operates some of your
electrical accessories.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
A warning tone will sound
if you open the driver’s
door when the key has not
been removed from the
ignition.
R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the switch.
The switch stays in the RUN position when the engine
is running. But even when the engine is not running,
you can use RUN to operate your electrical accessories
and to display some warning and indicator lights.
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to RUN for normal driving.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way.
If none of this works, then your vehicle needs
service.
Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
feature which will allow the radio to continue to work up
to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off.
Your radio will work when the ignition key is in RUN
or ACC. Once the key is turned off, the radio will
continue to work for up to 10 minutes or until any door
is opened.
9 (LOCK): You will only be able to remove your key
when the ignition is turned to LOCK.
The ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless
the shift lever is in PARK (P).
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, rotate the key
back from START to RUN. Holding the key in
START will not cause the vehicle to keep cranking.
Then push the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor, while you turn the ignition key to START.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and let
up on the accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Use the same instructions as stated earlier, when
starting your engine in very cold weather. It is
recommended that you use the engine block heater,
if equipped, to assist in starting your engine in very
cold weather.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Notice: Repeated attempts to start your engine, will
cause your battery to drain much sooner. Excessive
heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has this feature, in very cold weather
0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater
can help. You will get easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant
heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours
prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures above
32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not required.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, behind the battery.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
CAUTION: (Continued)
The shift lever is located on the center console.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever
There are several different positions for the automatic
transaxle.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever – push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
and also release the shift lever button as you maintain
brake application. Then, press the shift lever button
and move the shift lever into the desired gear.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while the engine is running at high speed may
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Notice: Shifting to a drive gear from NEUTRAL (N)
while the vehicle is moving could damage the
transaxle. Make sure the vehicle is stopped before
shifting from NEUTRAL (N) into a drive gear.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transaxle, see
page 4-30.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving with the automatic transaxle. If you need
more power for passing, and you are:
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),
push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator all the way down.
{CAUTION:
LOW FOUR (L4): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are
some times you might choose LOW FOUR (L4)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When going down a steep hill.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOW TWO (L2): This position gives you more
power but lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D). You can use LOW TWO (L2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
Transaxle Overheating
If the transaxle fluid temperature rises above
284°F (140°C) or rises rapidly, the Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light will flash. See Engine
more information. When the transaxle overheats it
will go into a protection mode and will default shift into
fifth gear if in the AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D)
position, or second gear if in the LOW TWO (L2)
position. Continue driving the vehicle in either position
depending on the required vehicle speed and load.
Once the fluid temperature lowers to the normal
temperature range, the transaxle will return to the
normal shift patterns. Towing or driving on long hills
can cause the transaxle fluid temperature to be higher
than normal. If the transaxle fluid temperature will
not cool, you may need to pull over and check the
transaxle fluid level. You should also check the engine
coolant temperature. If it is hot, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-24.
Notice: Do not drive in LOW TWO (L2) for more
than 25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph
(90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle.
Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or LOW
FOUR (L4) as much as possible. Do not shift into
LOW TWO (L2) unless you are going slower
than 65 mph (105 km/h) or you can damage
your engine.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
Parking Brake
Make sure to release the parking brake before driving
the vehicle.
If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving
at least 4 mph (6 km/h), a chime will activate to
remind you to release the parking brake.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
The parking brake lever is located to the right of the
driver’s seat.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition
is on, the brake system warning light will come on.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the
parking brake.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button. If you can, it means that the shift lever
was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position by
holding in the button on the shift lever and pushing
it all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-23.
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is in RUN.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever — push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P), as you maintain brake application.
Then, press the button on the shift lever and move the
shift lever into the gear you wish.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
1. Turn the key to LOCK.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the desired
drive gear.
5. Have your vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Mirrors
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on
each time the ignition is started. A light near the on/off
button will come on to indicate the automatic dimming
is on.
Manual Rearview Mirror
To adjust the angle of the mirror, move the mirror to a
position that allows you see to out of the back window.
To adjust the height of the mirror, adjust the arm
that connects the mirror to the windshield.
Press the on/off button for about four seconds to
manually turn the automatic dimming function on or off.
Temperature and Compass Display
To reduce glare from lights behind you, move the lever
toward you to the night position.
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, to cycle
between °F, °C and off.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
If the vehicle has this feature, an automatic dimming
mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize
glare at night from lights behind your vehicle. For more
page 2-32.
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to be
calibrated. For more information, see “Compass
Calibration” later in this section.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please consult your dealer.
Under certain circumstances, especially in idle, an
increase and delay in updating the temperature is
normal.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and the
outside temperature will both appear in the display at the
same time.
Y (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
Press the on/off button twice to turn on the compass.
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the mirror’s
compass could give false readings. The mirror is
set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will also be necessary to adjust
for compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press the on/off button approximately seven seconds
until the word ZONE appears in the display.
The compass is now in zone mode.
3. Press and release the on/off button until the
desired zone number appears in the display.
After approximately four seconds of inactivity,
the new zone number will be locked in and the
compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Calibration
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
If the vehicle has this feature, the automatic dimming
mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize
glare at night from lights behind your vehicle.
The mirror also has a dual display in the upper right
corner of the mirror that shows the compass reading and
the outside temperature.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
Y On/Off: Press this button to operate the automatic
dimming, compass and temperature features.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or until
CAL is displayed.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on
each time the ignition is started. A light near the on/off
button will come on to indicate the automatic dimming
is on.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Cleaning the Mirror
If the automatic dimming function is off, press and hold
the on/off button for four seconds to manually turn
the system back on.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance:
Temperature and Compass Display
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
Press the on/off button, located in the center, to cycle
between °F, °C and off. If the display reads CAL,
the compass needs to be calibrated. For more
information, see “Compass Calibration” later in this
section.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for five seconds
until the word ZONE appears in the display.
The compass is now in zone mode.
3. Press and release the on/off button within
five seconds until the new zone number appears
in the display. The display will show a compass
direction within a few seconds.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please consult your dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the mirror’s
compass could give false readings. The mirror is
set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Calibration
Outside Power Mirrors
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
The controls for the power
mirrors are located on the
instrument panel.
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in the on/off button for approximately eight seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
To adjust the mirrors do the following:
1. Move the selector switch to the left or right to
choose the driver’s or passenger’s mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
2. Press the corresponding edges of the round control
pad to move each mirror to the desired direction.
Cleaning the Mirror
Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see a little of
your vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
Outside Convex Mirrors
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved, creating a wider area of vision
for the driver.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live advisors
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If your airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call
to OnStar® Emergency where we can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in
the car, call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can
send a signal to unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they will get
you the help you need.
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Directions and Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
OnStar® Services
• RideAssist
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
first year, or upgrade to the Directions and Connections®
Plan to meet your needs. For more information, press
the OnStar® button to speak to an advisor.
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor by
pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Storage Areas
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses minutes to access
weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® User’s Guide for
more information.
Glove Box
To open the glove box, pull the handle to the left and
pull the glove box door down until it stops and is
fully open.
Cupholder(s)
There are two cupholders located at the lower front of
the center console armrest and a molded cupholder
on the floor of the center console.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
0: Your vehicle may be equipped with a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact with OnStar®.
See the Audio Steering Wheel Control section for your
specific vehicle operation.
When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directory
numbers, press this button once, wait for the response,
say the number(s) to be dialed, wait for the number(s)
to be repeated and then say “dial”. See the OnStar®
User’s Guide for more information.
To use the cupholders on the armrest, pull the tray forward.
There are two cupholders located at the rear of the
center console. Pull downward on the lid to use
the cupholders.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coinholder(s)
Luggage Carrier
Your vehicle has a coinholder on the center console.
{CAUTION:
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle may have a center console armrest with
storage area. Use the lever on the front of the console
to open it.
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
Garment Hooks
Your vehicle has garment hooks located on rear
headliner of the vehicle that can be pulled down for
hanging garments.
A luggage carrier allows you to load things on top of
your vehicle. The luggage carrier has side rails attached
to the roof, sliding crossrails, if equipped, and places
to use for tying things down. These let you load
some things on top of your vehicle, as long as they are
not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The roof rack crossrails can be locked in four
positions only.
Press the lever down and align the crossrails on both
sides with the holes on the siderails. Move the crossrail
by hand. There will be a notable click as the pins
align into the holes locking the crossrail into place.
Make sure lever is in the down position, and that you
are not able to slide the crossrail with your hand
when properly in place.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
Do not stand on plastic lower body panel when loading
cargo on the luggage carrier.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-31.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
crossrails are locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
To reposition the crossrail, pull up on the end levers of
the crossrail to the upright position. This will release
the pins from the holes in the siderail. You will be able
to move the crossrail into a new position.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, lock one
crossrail at the rear most position on the siderails and
lock the other crossrail above the opening of the
rear door to reduce wind noise.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover
Your vehicle may be equipped with an adjustable
panel/cargo cover feature. The panel/cargo cover can
be adjusted into three positions.
To use the panel in the lower position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
lower guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock it
in place.
The panel can be used in this position if you need
additional space above the panel. Place the cargo on
top of the panel in this position.
There is a flip panel towards the front of the cargo
cover. You may have to flip this panel upward in order
to gain access to the cargo cover.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The panel can be used in this position when you have
to place a flat or spare tire in the rear cargo area.
{CAUTION:
To use the panel in the upper position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the top
guides.
If you were to carry things on the adjustable
panel when it is in the upper (cargo cover) or
center positions, during a sudden vehicle
movement or a crash, those things could be
thrown around in the vehicle. You or others
could be injured. When it is in the upper or
center position, always secure any cargo on
the floor beneath the panel/cover.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of the
panel to lock it in place.
This can be used as a cargo cover for the rear area.
The panel may be installed either carpet or plastic side
up. The panel may also be used as a table in this
position. See “Table” following for more information.
To use the panel in the center position, do the following:
1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
middle guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of the
panel to lock it in place.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set up the table, do the following:
Table
1. With the adjustable panel in the upper position pull
rearward to position it for use as a table. The plastic
side should be up.
2. Rotate the knob to release the leg from the plastic
side of the table and rotate the leg outward.
3. Set the table leg onto the liftgate lock striker at the
rear edge of the vehicle.
Make sure to place the table leg securely onto the
liftgate lock striker.
Notice: Driving with the panel extended into
the table position could damage your vehicle.
Always have the panel in the stored position while
you are driving.
Notice: Placing hot items on the surface of the
table could damage it. Always be sure that the items
that are placed on the surface of the table are of
moderate temperature.
Your vehicle has an adjustable panel that also functions
as a table. The maximum load for the table is 100 lbs.
distributed (45 kg).
There are four hooks located on the table that can be
used for grocery bags.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To express-open the
Convenience Net
sunroof glass panel and
sunshade, press the switch
rearward and release it.
Your vehicle may have a rear compartment net to
prevent items from rolling under the rear seat.
Your vehicle is also equipped with four tie-down
anchors. Two anchors are located on the side trim,
just behind the rear seat, and the other two are located
on the floor at the rear of the cargo area.
Sunroof
If the vehicle has an express-open sunroof, the controls
to operate it are located on the headliner above the
rearview mirror. The ignition must be in RUN or ACC to
operate the sunroof.
To stop the sunroof before it is completely open, press
the switch rearward again. The sunshade cannot be
closed with the sunroof open. To close the sunroof,
press forward and hold the switch until the sunroof
stops, lifts and seals at the back of the sunroof glass.
To put the sunroof in the vent position, pull down on the
front of the switch. Push up on the front of the switch
to close it.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
page 2-31
K. Cruise Control System Buttons and Audio Steering
page 3-81.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel that allows you to adjust
the steering wheel.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located in
the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The lever to tilt the steering wheel is located on the left
side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and push the
lever down. Then, move the steering wheel to a
comfortable position and pull the lever up firmly to lock
the column in place.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
the lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or
high beam to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way
towards you. Then release it.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If the wiper blades are frozen to the
windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades
do become damaged, install new blades or blade
page 5-45.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
United States
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
with the arrow pointing to the numbers (1, 2, or 3).
Select 3 for the most frequent movement; select 1 for
the least frequent.
LO or OO (Low): Move the lever to this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
HI or OOOO (High): Move the lever to this
position for rapid wiping cycles.
Windshield Washer
Canada
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers. Push up or pull down
on the lever to place it in one of the following positions.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
MIST or 8(Mist): Pull the lever down and release
it for a single wiping cycle. The lever will return to
its original position. For more cycles, hold the lever down
before releasing it.
OFF or 9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to
Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you to operate
the windshield wipers. Washer fluid will squirt onto
the windshield and the wipers will run for a few cycles
to clear the windshield. For more wash cycles, pull
the lever toward you and hold it there.
turn off the wipers.
INT or & (Intermittent): Move the lever to this
position to set a delay between wipes. To set for a
shorter or longer delay between wipes, turn the band
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Cruise Control
The band on the wiper lever with the smaller arrow
operates the rear wiper/washer.
9(Off): Turn the band to this position to turn off the
rear wiper.
Z (Rear Wiper): Turn the band with the smaller arrow
to this position to turn on the rear wiper. To set for a
shorter or longer delay between wipes, turn the
other band with the larger arrow pointing to the
numbers (1, 2, or 3). Select 3 for the most frequent
movement; select 1 for the least frequent. The band
with the arrow pointing to the numbers (1, 2, or 3) will
affect both the front and rear wipers if they are on at the
same time.
If your vehicle has cruise control, the buttons for the
cruise control are located on the steering wheel.
Y (Wash): Turn and hold the band in this position to
spray washer fluid on the rear window. The rear wiper
will also come on. Release the band when enough fluid
has been sprayed on the window. The rear wiper will
run a few additional times after you release it.
I(Cruise On/Off): Push this button to turn the
system on and off.
+RES (Resume/Accelerate): Push the top part of this
button to make the vehicle resume a previously set
speed or to accelerate when cruise is already active.
−SET (Set/Decelerate): Push the bottom part of
this button to set the speed or to decrease the speed
when cruise is already active.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
turn the cruise control back on.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
Setting Cruise Control
If you use the accelerator pedal to increase your
speed for approximately sixty seconds or longer,
your vehicle’s cruise control will disengage and you
will need to reset your desired speed.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
1. Press the cruise on/off button. The indicator light
in the button will come on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the set button.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, disengages
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can press the cruise control resume button.
• Press set button until you reach the lower speed
you want, then release it.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
If you hold the resume button the vehicle will keep
going faster until you release the button or apply the
brake. So unless you want to go faster, do not hold the
resume button.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
However, if you use the accelerator pedal to increase
your speed for approximately 60 seconds or longer,
your cruise control will disengage and you will need to
reset your desired speed.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the set button, then release the button and the
accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher
speed.
•
Press the resume button. Hold it there until you get up
to the speed you want, and then release the button.
To increase your speed in very small amounts, press
the button briefly. Each time you do this, your vehicle
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Headlamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Applying the
brake or shifting into a lower gear will take you out
of cruise control. If you need to apply the brake or shift
to a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill slope,
you may not want to attempt to use your cruise
control feature.
The exterior lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the following positions:
AUTO (Off/Automatic Headlamps): Turn the control to
this position to put the headlamps in automatic mode.
Automatic mode will turn the exterior lamps on and
off depending upon how much light is available outside
of the vehicle.
Ending Cruise Control
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal.
Stepping on the brake will end the current cruise control
session only. Press the cruise on/off button to turn off
the system completely.
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
If the driver takes over the acceleration pedal for more
than sixty seconds, cruise control will shut off.
53 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control with the button on
the steering wheel or turn the ignition to LOCK, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Headlamps on Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you turn the exterior lamp band to the headlamp
position, your low-beam headlamps will come on.
The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will
also come on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
When you turn off the headlamps, the regular lamps will
go off, and your low-beam headlamps will come on to
the reduced brightness.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move the shift
lever to PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until you move
the shift lever out of PARK (P).
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness in daylight when
the following conditions are met:
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
• The ignition is on,
• the exterior lamp band is in the automatic position,
• the transaxle is not in PARK (P),
• the light sensor determines it is daytime, and
• the parking brake is released.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamps
control is in the automatic position, the headlamps
page 3-13.
When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlamps will be
on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker
and other lamps will not be on. The instrument panel will
not be lit up either.
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on top of the
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered, or
the headlamps will be on when you don’t need them.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
If your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lamps for
better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The button for your fog
lamps is located in the
instrument panel above
the radio.
The control for this
feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering column.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off.
When using fog lamps, the parking lamps or low-beam
headlamps must be on.
A light on the button will come on when the fog lamps
are on. Fog lamps will go off whenever you turn the
high-beam headlamps on. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will come
on again.
Turn the control up to brighten the lights or down to
dim them.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamp
Entry Lighting
The dome lamp switch has three positions.
If the dome lamp is in the AUTO position, the dome
lamp and the cargo lamp inside your vehicle will come
on when any door is opened. In addition, the light
will come on when the remote keyless entry unlock
button is pressed. It will stay on for 20 seconds or until
a door is opened. After the door is opened the light
will remain on and stay on for 20 seconds after the doors
are closed, or until you put the key in the ignition and
turn the key to RUN.
9(Off): The lamp will not come on as long as the
switch is in this position.
AUTO: The lamp will come on when a door is opened.
R(On): The lamp will stay on as long as the switch is
in this position.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Map Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to
protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system will
automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes. This will
avoid draining the battery. If the radio is on, it will turn
off after 10 minutes or if any door on the vehicle is
opened. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-16.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
CB radio.
Your vehicle may have lamps located on the headliner
above the rearview mirror. Push on the lens in the
lamp to turn them on and off.
The accessory power outlets are located in front of the
center console storage area, at the rear of the center
console, and in the rear cargo area.
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located over the rear compartment,
page 3-16.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlets and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Lift the lid to expose the ashtray. To remove the
ashtray, lift it up.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check with
your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Lift the lid to expose the cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go.
When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
The accessory power outlets can use equipment with a
maximum amperage rating up to 14. However, at
14 amperage, there is a potential to drain the battery.
Extended use of the auxiliary power outlets or large
current draws may drain the battery and/or shorten
battery life.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
Climate Controls
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. To turn off the air completely,
turn fan to 0 and select Recirculate.
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Use the right knob to select from the following modes:
There are two minor detents between each mode
to finely adjust airflow position.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately
half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs the remaining air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield.
The right knob may also be used to select the defrost
and defog modes that are described in this section.
Operation
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can also select modes by using the following
buttons:
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog or frost on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. To avoid fogging windows on rainy and
humid days at temperatures above freezing, run the air
conditioning compressor. Also, it is best to avoid the
use of recirculation mode except when maximum
A/C performance is needed or for short times to avoid
exterior odors. Use the defrost mode to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly. When
you select either of these modes (or the floor mode
which also helps defog the windows slightly), the system
runs the air-conditioning compressor and cancels
recirculation mode to dry the air; however, the
@ (Recirculate): Press this button on the center
knob to recirculate cabin air through the vehicle.
It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from
entering your vehicle or to help heat or cool the air
inside your vehicle more quickly. An indicator light below
the symbol will come on in this mode. Operation in
this mode during periods of high humidity and cool
outside temperatures may result in increased window
fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select
the defrost mode.
#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air-conditioning system on or off. When this button
is pressed, an indicator light on the button will come on
to let you know the air conditioning is activated.
Air-conditioning can be selected in any mode as long as
the fan switch is on.
recirculation light will stay on. For best results, clear all
snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
-(Defog): This mode directs half of the air to the
windshield and the side window outlets and half to the
floor outlets.
0(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window outlets, with some
air directed to the floor outlets.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block
the flow of air into your vehicle.
< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN. The rear window defogger will stay
on for approximately 15 minutes after the button is
pressed, unless the ignition is turned to ACC or LOCK.
If turned on again, the defogger will only run for
approximately five minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
button again or by turning off the engine.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment outside air is routed
through a passenger compartment filter. The filter
removes certain particles from the air, including pollen
and dust particles. Reductions in airflow, which may
occur more quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter
needs to be replaced early.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for when to replace the filter.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
5. Remove the filter from the filter housing by pressing
the release tab at the inboard edge of the filter
housing.
1. Remove the push pins from the rear of the
passenger’s side air inlet panel. It is located in the
rear of the engine compartment on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
6. Remove the filter from the vehicle.
7. Install a new passenger compartment air filter.
For the type of filter to use see Normal Maintenance
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the push pins from the top and forward
edge of the passenger’s side air inlet panel.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 5.
4. Remove the air inlet panel.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly — and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your trip odometer is located on the instrument panel
and shows how far your vehicle has been driven
since the trip odometer was last reset. To reset the trip
odometer to zero, press and hold the trip/reset button
on the speedometer for about two seconds.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.
The digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone
tries to turn it back.
Tachometer
The ERROR message is displayed on the odometer
indicating that the speedometer reading is approximately
10 percent above the actual speed. Press the trip
odometer button to return to the odometer/trip mode.
This message will appear every 10 minutes. If this
occurs, see your dealer for service.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensor,
the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Warning Light
{CAUTION:
The battery warning light
will come on briefly as a
check, when you turn
on the ignition. Then it
should go out when
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
the engine is started.
If the light does not come on when you start your
vehicle, have your vehicle serviced right away. This
condition may indicate your battery warning light is not
functioning properly. If this light comes on while you
are driving, be sure to turn off accessories such as the
radio and climate control system. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A chime will also sound if the parking brake is not fully
released and the vehicle is moving. If it stays on
after your parking brake is fully released, it means you
have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
The brake light will also come on to indicate a low brake
If the brake system warning light comes on, there is a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to
the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning
light on can lead to an accident. If the light is
still on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
United States
Canada
The brake light is located in the instrument panel cluster.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake light will come on
when you set your parking brake. The light will
stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
Your vehicle may have a
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds.
That is normal.
traction control system
warning light. The traction
control system warning
light may come on for the
following reasons:
• For vehicles equipped with the traction control
system and front-wheel drive, this light will come on
and stay on if you turn the system off by pressing
the traction control button located on the instrument
panel above the audio system. To turn the system
back on, press the button again. The warning light
should go off. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-10 for more information.
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on, there
may be a problem with the anti-lock portion of the brake
system. If the red BRAKE light is not on, you still
have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while you are driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning light
is not on, you still have brakes, but you do not have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
• For vehicles equipped with all-wheel-drive, this light
will come on and stay on when the all-wheel-drive
system is unable to protect for overheating
under extended heavy all-wheel-drive usage.
• If there is an engine-related and brake system
problem that is specifically related to traction control,
the traction control system will turn off and the
warning light will come on.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
Low Traction Light
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
If your vehicle has
the Traction Control
System (TCS) and
has front-wheel-drive,
this light will come on
when the system is
limiting wheel spin.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-24 for more information.
If your vehicle has all-wheel-drive, this light will come on
when the all-wheel-drive system is protecting itself from
overheating due to extended heavy all wheel drive usage.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature warning light on.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal. The roads may be slippery if this light comes on.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the system
stops limiting wheel spin. This light should also come
on for a few seconds when you start your vehicle.
If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
This light will also come on when starting your vehicle.
If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
This light will flash when the transaxle has overheated.
See “Transaxle Overheating”, under Automatic
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
This gage measures the
temperature of the
vehicle’s engine.
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
If the indicator needle moves into the shaded area,
the engine is too hot. A temperature indicator light
will turn on.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, and the temperature indicator
light comes on, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
may not be covered by your warranty.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
If the Light Is On Steady
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as
designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up,
stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and
cause the light to turn on.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that may
have developed.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil Pressure Light
{CAUTION:
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on when you
are driving. This indicates
that your engine is not
receiving enough oil.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working, but the light will go out when you
turn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on with
the ignition on, you may have a problem with the
fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• If the vehicle is idling at a stop sign, the light may
blink on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change Engine Oil Light
Reduced Engine Power Light
If this light comes on and
This light will come on
stays on for 30 seconds,
it means that service
is required for your
briefly when you start
the engine.
vehicle. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
After having the oil changed you will need to reset the
This light, along with the service engine soon light, will
be displayed when a noticeable reduction in the
vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop the vehicle and
turn off the ignition. Wait for 10 seconds and restart
your vehicle. This may correct the condition.
Security Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
With this system, the
security light will flash as
you open the door if
your ignition is off.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
If this light stays on, see your GM dealer as soon
as possible for diagnosis and repair.
This light will come on briefly when the vehicle is
turned on.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highbeam On Light
Gate Ajar Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
If this light comes on, your
liftgate is not completely
closed. Driving with
the liftgate open can cause
carbon monoxide (CO)
to enter the vehicle.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left in your tank.
This light is located on the
instrument panel cluster.
It goes on whenever
the Daytime Running
Lamps are on.
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light will
come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
page 3-37 for more information.
further information.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light below the fuel
• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
gage will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low on
fuel. When you add fuel the light should go off. If it does
not, have your vehicle serviced.
• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize after the
ignition is turned on, and will go back to empty
when you turn the ignition off.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving
on page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio
system so you can use it with less effort and take full
advantage of its features.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls (if equipped).
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Setting the Time
To set the hour, press the clock button. The clock
symbol will appear on the audio display and the hour
number will flash. Then turn the ADJ knob to increase or
to decrease the hour. To set the minutes, press the
clock button again. The minute numbers will flash.
Then turn the ADJ knob to increase or to decrease
the minutes. The time can be set with the ignition on
or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
release the clock button to enter the clock set mode,
then press and hold the clock button for three seconds
until UPDATED appears on the display. If the time
is not available from the station, NO TIME UPDATE will
appear on the display.
Notice: The chime signals related to seat belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the GM radio/entertainment
system. If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
page 5-3.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
Radio with CD (Base Level)
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name
of the program being broadcast.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then as you drive, automatic volume increases the
volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to
you as you drive. AUTO VOL NONE will appear on the
display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle speed
or if the engine is not running. To turn automatic volume
off, press this button until AUTO VOL OFF appears
on the display.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
$ (Mute): Press and release this button for less than
two seconds to silence the system. MUTE will appear
on the display. Pressing this button again or any
pushbutton on the radio turns the sound back on.
Playing the Radio
O (Power): Press this button to turn the system on
DISP (Display): For RDS, press the DISP knob to
change what appears on the display while using RDS.
The display options are station name, RDS station
frequency, PTY, and the name of the program
(if available).
and off.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
AUTO e (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW,
AUTO VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press either arrow again to stop scanning. If no station
can be found during scan, NOT FOUND will appear
on the display and the radio will go back to the
last tuned station.
Finding a Station
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2
or AM. The display will show the selection.
To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go
to the first preset station stored on the pushbuttons, play
for five seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press SCAN again to stop scanning presets.
XM/AUX: Press this button to switch between XM1 or
XM2 (if equipped).
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the left or right arrow to go to
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
the previous or the next station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either arrow for less
than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display
and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station,
play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
P/Q (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BASS, MID,
or TREBLE appears on the display. Turn the ADJ knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass, mid, or treble level. If a station is weak or
noisy, decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2 or AM.
Press XM/AUX to select XM1 or XM2.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then press
and hold this button for more than two seconds. You will
hear one beep and the tone control will be adjusted to
the middle position.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set will
return and the equalization that was selected will be
stored for that pushbutton.
To adjust all tone controls to the middle position, push
and hold the tone button when no tone control is
displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display
and you will hear one beep. The bass, midrange,
and treble will be adjusted to the middle position.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk,
pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press and release the
EQ button until TONE Custom appears on the display.
You can also manually adjust the bass, midrange,
and treble using the Bass/Treble button.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
S (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, push and
release the balance and fade button until BAL appears
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and a program type
will appear on the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
speakers, push and release the balance and fade button
until FADE appears on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to
move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK right arrow to select the PTY and to take you
to the PTYs first station.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold this button for
more than two seconds. You will hear a beep and the
speaker control will be adjusted to the middle position.
4. To go to another station within that PTY press the
SEEK right arrow again. If the radio cannot find the
desired PTY, NOT FOUND will appear on the
display and the radio will return to the last station
you were listening to.
To adjust both speaker controls to the middle position,
push and hold the tone button for more than
four seconds when no speaker control is displayed.
ALL CENTERED will appear on the display and you will
hear a beep. The balance and fade will be adjusted
to the middle position.
5. Press the P-TYPE button or wait 15 seconds, to
exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If PTY is on, the radio will search for stations with the
selected PTY.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The last message can be displayed by pressing the
MSG button. You can view the last message until a new
message is received or a different station is tuned to.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO MESSAGE AVAIL will appear on the display.
Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and must be
returned to the dealer for service.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to
see the message. The message may display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to the dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the MSG
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, MSG will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
Not Available
The Radio senses that
the XM™ system is not
present.
Your vehicle may not be equipped with the XM™ system.
Contact your dealership for more information.
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Lock
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with the servicing facility.
Radio ID
Unknown
Check XM
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,
there may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Playing a CD
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin
playing. If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off,
first press the eject or DISP knob.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or the
radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD icon will appear on the
display. As each new track starts to play, TRACK and
the track number will appear on the display.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
more information.
Do not play 3 inch (8 cm) CDs without a standard
adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track. If this button is pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving backward through
the CD.
Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track.
If this button is pressed more than once, the player
will continue moving forward through the CD.
\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
© SCAN ¨: To scan the CD, press either SCAN
arrow. Use this feature to listen to ten seconds of each
track of the CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
B RPT (Repeat): Press this button once to hear a
track over again. RPT ON will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again to
turn off repeat play. RPT OFF will appear on the display
and RPT will disappear from the display.
DISP (Display): Press the DISP knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. The track number,
and the elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display. To change the default on the display,
track or elapsed time, press the knob until you see the
display you want, then hold the knob for two seconds.
The radio will produce one beep and the selected
display will now be the default. Pressing this knob will
also display text on commercially recorded CDs
(if available).
B RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. TRACK,
TRK#, and the RDM icon will appear on the display.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the display
when each track starts to play. Press RDM again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display and
the RDM icon will disappear from the display.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select the desired
equalization setting while playing a CD. The equalization
will be automatically recalled whenever a CD is
played. For more information, see “EQ” listed previously
in this section.
CD Messages
CHECK DISK: If this message appears on the display,
it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
B CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. CD will appear on the display.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
Radio with CD (MP3)
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name
of the program being broadcast.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then as you drive, automatic volume increases the
volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to
you as you drive. AUTO VOL NONE will appear on the
display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle
speed or if the engine is not running. To turn off
automatic volume, press this button until AUTO VOL
OFF appears on the display.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
$ (Mute): Press and release this button for less than
two seconds to silence the system. MUTE will appear
on the display. Pressing this button again or any
pushbutton on the radio turns the sound back on.
Playing the Radio
O (Power): Press this button to turn the system on
DISP (Display): For RDS, press the DISP knob to
change what appears on the display while using RDS.
The display options are station name, RDS station
frequency, PTY, and the name of the program
(if available).
and off.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
AUTO e (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW,
AUTO VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To scan preset stations, press and hold SEEK for
more than four seconds until you hear a beep.
The radio will go to the first preset station stored on
the pushbuttons, play for five seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press SEEK again to stop
scanning presets.
Finding a Station
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2
or AM. The display will show the selection.
XM/AUX: Press this button to switch between XM1 or
XM2 (if equipped).
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left or right arrow to go to
the previous or the next station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Press and hold either arrow for two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next station. Press either arrow again to stop
scanning. If no station can be found during scan,
NOT FOUND will appear on the display and the radio
will go back to the last tuned station.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
P/Q (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BASS, MID,
or TREBLE appears on the display. Turn the ADJ
knob to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass, mid, or treble level. If a station is weak or
noisy, decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2 or AM.
Press XM/AUX to select XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then press
and hold this button for more than two seconds. You will
hear one beep and the tone control will be adjusted to
the middle position.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set will
return and the equalization that was selected will be
stored for that pushbutton.
To adjust all tone controls to the middle position, push
and hold the tone button when no tone control is
displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display
and you will hear one beep. The bass, midrange,
and treble will be adjusted to the middle position.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk,
pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press and release the
EQ button until TONE Custom appears on the display.
You can also manually adjust the bass, midrange,
and treble using the Bass/Treble button.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
S (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, push and
release the balance and fade button until BAL appears
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and a program type
will appear on the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
speakers, push and release the balance and fade button
until FADE appears on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to
move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK right arrow to take you to the PTYs first
station.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold this button for
more than two seconds. You will hear one beep and the
speaker control will be adjusted to the middle position.
4. To go to another station within that PTY press the
SEEK right arrow again. If the radio cannot find the
desired PTY, NOT FOUND will appear on the
display and the radio will return to the last station
that was playing.
To adjust both speaker controls to the middle position,
push and hold the tone button for more than four seconds
when no speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear one beep.
The balance and the fade will be adjusted to the middle
position.
5. Press the P-TYPE button or wait 15 seconds, to
exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is not longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If PTY is on, the radio will search for stations with the
selected PTY.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The last message can be displayed by pressing the
MSG button. You can view the last message until a new
message is received or a different station is tuned to.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO MESSAGE AVAIL will appear on the display
Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to the dealer for service.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to
see the message. The message may display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to the dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the MSG
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, MSG will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
Not Available
The Radio senses that
the XM™ system is
not present.
Your vehicle may not be equipped with the XM™ system.
Contact your dealership for more information.
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Lock
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with the servicing facility.
Radio ID
Unknown
Check XM
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,
there may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Playing a CD
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin
playing. If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off,
first press the eject or DISP knob.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or the
radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD icon will appear on the
display. As each new track starts to play, TRACK
and the track number will appear on the display.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
more information.
Do not play 3 inch (8 cm) CDs without a standard
adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and release the right arrow to go to the start
of the next track. If this button is pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the CD.
s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
To scan the CD, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
more than two seconds. Use this feature to listen to
ten seconds of each track of the CD. Press either
SEEK arrow again, to stop scanning.
\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
DISP (Display): Press the DISP knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. The track number,
and the elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display. To change the default on the display,
track or elapsed time, press the knob until you see the
display you want, then hold the knob for two seconds.
The radio will produce one beep and the selected
display will now be the default. Pressing this knob will
also display text on commercially recorded CDs
(if available).
B RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. TRACK,
TRK #, and the RDM icon will appear on the display.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the display
when each track starts to play. Press RDM again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display and
the RDM icon will disappear from the display.
© SEEK ¨: Press and release the left arrow to go to
the start of the current track. If this button is pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select the desired
equalization setting while playing a CD. The equalization
will be automatically recalled whenever a CD is played.
For more information, see “EQ” listed previously in
this section.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
XM/AUX: Press this button to listen to XM™
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
(if equipped) when a CD is playing. The inactive CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
• Make sure playlists have a.pls, or.m3u, or.rmp
extension, other file extensions may not work.
B CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. CD will appear on the display.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names
may use more disc memory space than necessary.
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of
the file, folder or playlist names. You can also play
an MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders.
The system can support up to 11 folders in depth,
though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in
order to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during playback.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the ignition or radio off if this
button is pressed first.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R disc.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better
to burn the disc all at once.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to
any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will
always be accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks will be played in the following order:
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
Empty Directory or Folder
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
will begin from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root directory
have been played, play will continue from files
according to their numerical listing. After playing the
last track from the last folder, play will begin
again at the first track of the first folder or root
directory.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See DISP later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. When displaying the
name of the folder the radio will display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The radio will go back to the default display and the
CD icon will appear. If you want to insert an MP3 with
the ignition off, first press the EJECT button or push the
RCL knob. If you insert a CD with the radio off and
the ignition on, it will start to play.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will display the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Track names longer than 32 characters or 2 pages will
be shortened.
Preprogrammed Playlists
The track number will appear on the display, as each
new track starts to play.
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
more information.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD will begin to play
after the player has read the table of contents, has read
the file structure, and has determined where the first
playable track is located. READING DISC will appear on
the display. After the MP3 has been read, the number
of folders and tracks will appear on the display.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
xc w (Previous/Next Folder): Press the down or
the up arrow to go to the first track in the previous or
next folder. Pressing this button while in folder random
mode will take you to the previous or next folder and
random the tracks in that folder.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
s(Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse
quickly within a track. Press and hold this button for
less than two seconds to reverse at 10 times the
normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more than
two seconds to reverse at 20 times the normal
playing speed. Release the button to play the track.
REV and the elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
\(Forward): Press and hold this button to advance
quickly within a track. Press and hold this button for
less than two seconds to advance at 10 times the
normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more than
two seconds to advance at 20 times the normal
playing speed. Release the button to play the track.
FWD and the elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
B DIR (Directory): Press and release this button to
display the current directory structure (flat or normal).
Press and release this button twice to change the
directory structure. When flat is enabled, the tracks on
the MP3 will be alphabetized by song name. The
MP3 will play the next alphabetical track when the
current track is finished.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADJ (Adjust): Turning this knob will fast track reverse
or advance through the tracks in all folders or playlists.
The track number and file name will appear on the
display for each track. Turning this knob while in random
will fast track reverse or advance the tracks in
sequential order.
B RDM (Random): To random the tracks in the
current folder or playlist, press and release this button.
FLDR RDM ON will appear on the display. Once all
of the tracks in the current folder or playlist have been
played the system will move on to the next folder or
playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.
DISP (Display): Press the DISP knob to switch
between track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of
day mode. The display will show sixteen characters, but
there can be two pages of text. If there are more
than eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist
name, pressing this knob within two seconds will take
you to the next page of text. If there are no other pages
to be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds
will take you to the next display mode.
To random all the tracks on the CD, press and hold this
button for two seconds. You will hear a beep and
DISC RDM ON will appear on the display. This feature
will not work with playlists.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
Press and release this button again to turn off random
play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
• Track mode will display the current track number
and the ID3 tag song name.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track. Pressing either arrow for
more than two seconds will search the previous or next
tracks at two tracks per second. Release the button
to stop searching and to play the track.
• Folder/playlist mode will display the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MSG (Message): Press this button to switch within the
ID3 tag information such as title, artist name, and
album.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
XM/AUX: Press this button to listen to XM™
(if equipped) when a CD is playing. The inactive CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
B CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. CD will appear on the display when a
CD is loaded.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible.
See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
Radio with Six-Disc CD
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name
of the program being broadcast.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then as you drive, automatic volume increases the
volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to
you as you drive. AUTO VOL NONE will appear on the
display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle
speed or if the engine is not running. To turn automatic
volume off, press this button until AUTO VOL OFF
appears on the display.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
$ (Mute): Press and release this button for less than
two seconds to silence the system. MUTE will appear
on the display. Pressing this button again or any
pushbutton on the radio turns the sound back on.
Playing the Radio
O (Power): Press this button to turn the system on
DISP (Display): For RDS, press the DISP knob to
change what appears on the display while using RDS.
The display options are station name, RDS station
frequency, PTY, and the name of the program
(if available).
and off.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
AUTO e (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW,
AUTO VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press SCAN again to stop scanning. If no station can
be found during scan, NOT FOUND will appear on
the display and the radio will go back to the last tuned
station.
Finding a Station
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2
or AM. The display will show the selection.
To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. the radio
will go to the first preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for five seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press SCAN again to stop
scanning presets.
XM/AUX: Press this button to switch between XM1 or
XM2 (if equipped).
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the left or right arrow to go to
the previous or the next station and stay there.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
SCAN: Press and hold this button for less than
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
P/Q (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BASS, MID,
or TREBLE appears on the display. Turn the ADJ knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass, mid, or treble level. If a station is weak or
noisy, decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2 or AM. Press
XM/AUX to select XM1 or XM2.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then press
and hold this button for more than two seconds. You will
hear one beep and the tone control will be adjusted to
the middle position.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
To adjust all tone controls to the middle position, push
and hold the tone button when no tone control is
displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display,
you will hear one beep and the tone controls will be
adjusted to the middle position.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk,
pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press and release the
EQ button until TONE Custom appears on the display.
Then manually adjust the bass, midrange, and treble
using the Bass/Treble button.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
S (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press and
release the balance and fade button until BAL appears
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and a program type
will appear on the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the balance and fade
button until FADE appears on the display. Turn the
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK right arrow to select and to take you to
the PTYs first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY press the
SEEK right arrow again. If the radio cannot find the
desired PTY, NOT FOUND will appear on the
display and the radio will return to the last station
that was playing.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold this button
for more than two seconds. You will hear one beep and
the speaker control will be adjusted to the middle
position.
5. Press the P-TYPE button or wait 15 seconds,
to exit program type select mode.
To adjust both speaker controls to the middle position,
push and hold the tone button when no speaker
control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on
the display, you will hear one beep and the speaker
controls will be adjusted to the middle position.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If PTY is on, the radio will search for stations with the
selected PTY.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The last message can be displayed by pressing the
MSG button. You can view the last message until a new
message is received or a different station is tuned to.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO MESSAGE AVAIL will appear on the display.
Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to the dealer for service.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to
see the message. The message may display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to the dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the MSG
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, MSG will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
Not Available
The Radio senses that
the XM™ system is not
present.
Your vehicle may not be equipped with the XM™ system.
Contact your dealership for more information.
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Lock
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your dealer.
Radio ID
Unknown
Check XM
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0,
there may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Playing a CD
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
When a CD is inserted, the CD icon will appear on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
more information.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, with
the radio on or off, press the LOAD button to cancel the
loading function. The radio will begin to play the last
CD loaded.
B LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs into
the CD player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will be displayed and the currently selected slot
number will be underlined.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for INSERT CD to flash on the display.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
Z (Eject): To eject a single CD press this button.
EJECTING CD # will appear on the display and the single
CD icon will flash. When the CD is ready to be removed
the CD will eject part way from the radio and REMOVE
CD # will flash with the single CD icon flashing until the
CD is removed. If the CD is not removed within
25 seconds the radio will pull it back in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and MULTI LOAD CD, then
INSERT CD and the number will appear on the
display.
To eject multiple CDs, press and hold the eject button.
EJECTING ALL CDS will appear on the display, the
single CD icon will flash, and you will hear a beep.
When the CD is ready to be removed the CD will eject
part way from the radio and REMOVE CD # will
flash with the single CD icon flashing until the CD is
removed. If the CD is not removed within 25 seconds the
radio will pull it back in. After the CD is removed the
radio will repeat the previous actions until all of the CDs
have been removed or a CD is pulled back in.
3. Once INSERT CD and the number appears on the
display, load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the
slot, label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, INSERT CD and the
number will appear on the display again. Once
INSERT CD and the number appear on the display
again, you can load another CD. The CD player
takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load more
than six.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, press the numbered
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to play.
A small bar will appear under the CD number that is
playing, and the track number will appear.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT ON TRK # will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn
it off. RPT OFF will appear on the display.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for more than two seconds.
RPT CD # will appear on the display. Press
RPT again to turn it off. RPT OFF will appear on
the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
s (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse
quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced
volume. T#, the elapsed time of the track, and REV
will appear on the display. Release this button to play
the passage.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs.
\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. T#, the elapsed time of the track,
and FWD will appear on the display. Release this button
to play the passage.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press the RDM button. RDM ONE
will appear on the display. Press RDM again to
turn it off. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold the RDM button for
more than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL CDS and RDM will appear on
the display. Press RDM again to turn it off.
RANDOM OFF will appear on the display.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select the desired
equalization setting while playing a CD. The equalization
will be automatically set whenever a CD is played.
For more information on equalization, see “EQ” listed
previously in this section.
o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the beginning of
the next track. If either arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward or forward through the CD.
AM/FM: Press this button to play the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
SCAN: Press and release this button to scan the
current CD. The CD will go to the next track, play the
first 10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press the
SCAN button again to stop scanning.
XM/AUX: Press this button to listen to XM™
(if equipped) when a CD is playing. The inactive CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and hold the
SCAN button for more than two seconds. The CD will
go to the next CD, play the first 10 seconds of each
track, then go on to the next CD. Press the SCAN button
again to stop scanning.
B CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio.
DISP (Display): Press the DISP button to switch
between time and the elapsed time of the track.
To change the default on the display (CD#/Track#/
Time, CD#/Track#, or Track#/Elapsed Time), press the
button until you see the display you want, then hold
the button for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SONG LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to
save more than 20 selections.
Using Song List Mode
R (Song List): The six-disc CD changer has a
feature called song list. This feature is capable of saving
20 track selections.
To play the song list, press and release the song list
button. One beep will be heard and SONG LIST
will appear on the display. The recorded tracks will
begin to play in the order that they were saved.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the
following steps:
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK arrows.
Seeking past the last saved track will return to the
first saved track.
1. Turn the radio on and load it with at least one CD.
See “LOAD” listed previously in this section for
more information.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.
If S-LIST appears on the display, press the song list
button to turn it off.
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
SONG LIST will appear on the display.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK left arrow to
locate the track to be saved. The track will begin
to play.
3. Press either SEEK arrow to select the desired track
to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the song list button for two seconds.
When pressing song list, one beep will be heard
immediately. After two seconds of continuously
pressing the song list button, two beeps will
be heard to confirm that the track has been deleted
and TRACK number DELETED will appear on
the display.
4. Press and hold the song list button for two or more
seconds to save the track into memory. When song
list is pressed, a beep will be heard immediately.
After two seconds of continuously pressing song list,
two beeps will sound to confirm that the track has
been saved and TRACK number ADDED will
appear on the display.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track will be added to the end of
the list.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:
5. Turn the CD player on.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
6. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
SONG LIST will appear on the display.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
7. Press and hold the song list button for more than
four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed by
two beeps after two seconds, and a final beep will
be heard after four seconds. SONG LIST EMPTY
will appear on the display indicating the song
list has been deleted.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the
song list again are added to the bottom of the list.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
To end song list mode, press the song list button.
One beep will be heard and SONG LIST will be
removed from the display.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
They include the following:
Theft-Deterrent Feature
x SEEK w: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will appear
on the display.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow
to go to the next or previous track.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset stations
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to go to the next available CD, if multiple
CDs are loaded.
x u w (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release this
button to silence the system. Press and release this
button again, or any other radio button, to turn the
sound on.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations will
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
when things like storms and power lines interfere with
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing
the treble on your radio.
Press and hold this button for two seconds to interact
page 2-32 in this manual.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
listening to a CD and a remote device. The inactive CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
FM Stereo
Radio Reception
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as
with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the
XM™ signal for a period of time. The radio may display
NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Care of the CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
Fixed Mast Antenna
Care of Your CDs
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the front quarter panel.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Chime Level Adjustment
Chime level adjustment is only available on RDS radios.
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
To change the volume level of the chime, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power
off. The volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display.
To change back to the default or normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level
will change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL
will appear on the radio display. Each time the chime
volume is changed, three chimes will sound as an
example of the new volume selected. Removing the
radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime
module will disable vehicle chimes.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
If the rear roof rack rail is too close to the XM™ antenna
or if objects stored on the roof rack cover or block the
XM™ antenna, the performance of the XM™ system
may be affected.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be
ready. Rear-end collisions are about the most
preventable of accidents. Yet they are common.
Allow enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate on the
driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task makes proper defensive driving
more difficult and can even cause a collision,
with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help do
these things, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on
each person and situation, here is some general
information on the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC
limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
{CAUTION:
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems
have to do their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,
it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control System
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, this warning light
on the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
you start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you steer around
the obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle
cannot respond to your steering. Momentum will
carry it in whatever direction it was headed when the
wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into
the very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
If you do not have anti-lock brakes, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this
by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing
pressure.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
anti-lock brakes, it is different. See Anti-Lock Brake
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
If you have anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at
the same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock
brakes, your first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard
and hold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control system
can be turned off by
Traction Control System (TCS)
pressing the traction
control button, located on
the instrument panel
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
above the audio system.
the system reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
The traction control system can be activated again by
pressing the traction control button.
This light will come on
when your traction control
system is limiting wheel
spin. You may feel or hear
the system working, but
this is normal.
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the
button, the traction control off light will appear on
the instrument panel cluster. The system will not turn off
until there is no longer a current need to limit wheel
spin. You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. If the light does not come on,
you may not have traction control and your vehicle
should be serviced by a dealer.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system on. But you can turn the traction
control system off if you ever need to. You should turn
the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in
sand, mud, ice or snow and rocking the vehicle is
page 4-31.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
Steering
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD
system operates automatically without any action
required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to
slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive
the vehicle as required. There may be a slight
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the power
steering assist system will continue to operate until you
are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power
steering assist because the electric power steering
system is not functioning, you can steer, but it will take
more effort.
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
This light will come on
when engine torque is
reduced to protect the
AWD system from
overheating. You may feel
or hear a change in engine
output, but this is normal.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time,
you may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist
should return shortly after a few normal steering
movements.
During heavy AWD applications, the engine torque
may be reduced to protect AWD system components.
If the vehicle is exposed to extended heavy AWD usage,
the AWD system will shut itself off to protect the
system from overheating. When the system cools down,
the AWD system will activate itself again automatically;
this cool-down can take up to 20 minutes depending
on outside temperature and vehicle use.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems, such as abnormally high steering effort for
a prolonged period of time, contact your dealer for
service repairs.
If the AWD system is unable to protect the system
from overheating, the traction off light will come on to
indicate no protection capability. If this light comes
on, take your vehicle in for service.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The same thing can happen if you are steering
through a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate.
Those two control systems — steering and
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
acceleration — can overwhelm those places where
the tires meet the road and make you lose control.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you
turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you
have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed.
While you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you
have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard
braking can demand too much of those places.
You can lose control.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock your wheels.
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate
your right lane change signal and move back into
the right lane. Remember that your passenger
side outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just
passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will
have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping back.
And if something happens to cause you to
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
cancel your pass, you need only slow down and
drop back again and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder,
and start your left lane change signal before
moving out of the right lane to pass.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to
a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS),
remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid.
If you do not have this system, or if the system is off,
then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do
not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the wheels
are no longer rolling, release enough pressure on the
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare, as from a
driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle
with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much
road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as the headlamps should be checked
regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are
not even aware of it.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water crossing,
your vehicle can be carried away. As little as
six inches of flowing water can carry away a
smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warning signs, and otherwise be
very cautious about trying to drive through
flowing water.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
City Driving
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just your
parking lamps — to help make you more visible
to others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
on page 5-47.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Then here are some tips:
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), it will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on
a slippery road. But you can turn the TCS off if you ever
need to. You should turn the TCS off if your vehicle
ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If Your
page 4-30. Even though your vehicle has TCS, you will
want to slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want
to turn the TCS off, such as when driving through
deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control System
If you do not have TCS, accelerate gently. Try not to
break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the
drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under
the tires even more.
Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
you will want to brake very gently, too. If you do
page 4-7. ABS improves your vehicle’s stability when
you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Whether you
have ABS or not, you will want to begin stopping
sooner than you would on dry pavement. Without ABS,
if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the
brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to
get the most traction you can.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide.
Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear
in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach,
such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a
curve or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle
can carry. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Vehicle Certification label.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
{CAUTION:
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
has traction control, you should turn your traction
control system off. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-10. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that does not get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See
“Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label
is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker). The tire and
loading information label lists the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds. The vehicle
capacity weight includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity
for your vehicle.
Example 1
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Item
Total
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-38 for important information on towing
a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s maximum
vehicle capacity weight and seating positions.
The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s maximum
vehicle capacity weight.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Certification Label
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
{CAUTION:
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its
wheels on the ground. If you have a two-wheel-drive
vehicle, it can be towed with two of its wheels on
the ground. See “Dolly Towing” following. If you have an
all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. It can be towed with the
car carrier equipment.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
page 4-22.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing
Towing a Trailer
If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed
with two of its wheels on the ground. To dolly tow
your vehicle, do the following:
{CAUTION:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be
towed with car carrier equipment.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. Trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability,
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
That is the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later in
this section.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a
trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• Weight of the trailer
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at our Customer Assistance
for more information.
• Weight of the trailer tongue
• Weight on your vehicle’s tires
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
If you have the trailer towing package, your vehicle can
tow up to 2,900 lbs. (1 300 kg) with up to five occupants
or up to 3,500 lbs. (1 575 kg) with up to two occupants.
But even that can be too heavy.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, passengers,
or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight
your vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the
trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you will tow
a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW
because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.
information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can also depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle, and the amount of tongue
weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Certification/Tire Label at the rear edge of the driver’s
Then be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you will need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
• If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg), be sure to use
a properly mounted, weight-carrying hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
very important for proper vehicle loading and
good handling when you’re driving.
If you are using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, remember to seal the holes when you
remove the hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-25. Dirt and water can, too.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Chains
Driving with a Trailer
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the
trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could come into your vehicle. You cannot
see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness
To maximize your safety when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you will be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main heating
or cooling system on and with the fan on
any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air
into your vehicle. Do not use the climate
control setting for maximum air because it
only recirculates the air inside your vehicle.
Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes, do not
try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because you are a
good deal longer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Parking on Hills
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring.
{CAUTION:
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you are about to turn, change lanes or stop.
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not.
It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, do the
following:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than
1,000 lbs (450 kg), drive in L4 instead of AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) or, as you need to, a lower gear.
This will minimize heat build-up and extend the life of
your transaxle.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you do the following:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for
more on this. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid, engine oil,
belts, cooling system and brake system. Each of
these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help
you find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a good
idea to review these sections before you start your trip.
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-14.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
for additional information.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-31. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may
not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your
GM dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol)
and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would
not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-31.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle, to the left of
the steering column.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the
secondary hood release lever.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then just let the
hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
page 5-35.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
page 5-21.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil
crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-89.
SAE 5W-30 may not
appear on all caps.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• SAE 5W-30
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and
not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil light will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained people
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and
reset the system. It is also important to check your
oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol meet GM Standard GM6094M
are all you will need for good performance and engine
protection.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of
oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil
light being turned on, reset the system.
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
The change engine oil light will flash while the
system is resetting.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the change engine oil light comes back on and stays
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life
system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
1. Turn off the engine.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
2. Disconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Disconnect the crank case ventilation tube.
5. Remove the air outlet duct.
4. Loosen the screws on the clamps holding the air
outlet duct in place. Do not pry the clamps off.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten the screws
on the clamps that hold the duct in place.
10. Reconnect the crank case ventilation tube.
11. Reconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
6. Undo the clamps on the filter cover. To remove
the cover, pull up on the front and then pull the
cover out.
7. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and
inspect the air cleaner and air outlet duct for cracks,
cuts, and deterioration. The air outlet duct must
be replaced if damaged.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
8. Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-24.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional
transaxle fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always use
the automatic transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 25,000 miles (41 500 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 100,000 miles
(166 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD
FILL line. When your engine is warm, the level should
be at the COLD FILL line or a little higher.
The surge tank is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If the air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in a traffic
jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the
highest gear while driving.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about ten minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
An overheat warning can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still have
the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in
this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage will indicate
an overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles
(km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 5-13.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Coolant Surge Tank
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and
tools away from any underhood electric fan.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.
If it is not, you may have a leak at the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
on page 5-26 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant.
That could cause an engine fire, and you could
be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
{CAUTION:
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the COLD FILL line, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop. This will allow any pressure still
left to be vented out the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the
COLD FILL line.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the
COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check the level in the surge tank when the cooling
system has cooled down. If the coolant is not at
the proper level, repeat Steps 1 through 3 and reinstall
the pressure cap. If the coolant is not at the proper
level when the system cools down again, see your
dealer.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
When you need windshield or rear window washer fluid
be sure to read the instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
reservoir.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving,
except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Your rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators, but
if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the
rear brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each
time the tires are removed for rotation or changing.
When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the
rear brakes inspected, too.
{CAUTION:
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery.
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved GM replacement parts. If you do not,
your brakes may no longer work properly. For example,
if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for
your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change in
many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
For battery replacement, see your dealer or the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
You must close all doors and the liftgate before
reconnecting the battery. After reconnecting the battery,
you must press the unlock button on the key transmitter.
Failure to follow this procedure may result in a
sounding alarm. Pressing unlock on the key transmitter
would stop the sounding alarm.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save your radio!
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
negative (−) terminal locations on each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and
a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal for
that purpose.
The remote positive (+)
terminal is located under
the engine compartment
fuse block cover, and
is marked with a plus (+)
symbol on the cover.
To access the terminal,
remove the fuse block
cover.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The remote negative (−)
terminal is located in the
front of the engine
compartment, near the
engine oil dipstick.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
for more information on the location of the
remote positive (+) terminal and the engine oil
dipstick.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal
for this purpose.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts, too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter to disarm your content
theft-deterrent system.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
All-Wheel Drive
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module)
How to Check Lubricant
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs,
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
AWD Differential Case
B. Drain Plug
{CAUTION:
A. Fill Plug
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it
repaired, if needed.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Gently pull the radiator
cover/front grill toward
you and pull the
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
front grill trim bar away
from the headlamp
lens. The front grill bar
is attached to the
for more information.
headlamp lens with a
hidden clip.
2. Remove the fastener plugs from the top of the
radiator cover/front grill.
4. Remove the three headlamp assembly attachment
screws.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the radiator cover/front grill toward you and pull
the headlamp assembly up and out from the vehicle.
6. Press the clip (A) on
the electrical connector
when replacing the
low-beam or high-beam
bulb, then pull it
straight off. Turn the
bulb retaining ring (B)
counterclockwise
to remove it and then
pull the bulb assembly
straight out.
For all other bulbs, turn the socket counterclockwise
and pull it out from the headlamp assembly.
Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
7. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket into the headlamp assembly by turning it
clockwise.
A. Parking Lamp
For the low-beam or high-beam bulb, install the
new bulb being sure to align the notches in the bulb
with the notches in the headlamp assembly.
B. Sidemarker Lamp
C. Low/High-Beam Headlamp
D. Turn Signal Lamp
8. Place the retaining ring over the bulb/socket and
turn it clockwise to tighten it and secure the
bulb/socket.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the
headlamp assembly.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Carefully slide the
taillamp assembly
outward to clear the
stud (see arrow)
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
A. Turn Signal
Lamp/Taillamp
and then rearward and
away from the body
of the vehicle.
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
D. Back-Up Lamp
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to disconnect
it from the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
6. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.
more information.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp housing and
turn it clockwise to secure.
2. Remove the taillamp
screw covers and
then remove the
two screws.
8. Reverse Steps 2 and 3 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Bulbs
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information.
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamp
Bulb Number
921
Front Parking Lamp
194 N/A
168
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Low/High-Beam Lamp
Rear Sidemarker Lamp
Rear Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp
Stoplamp/Taillamp
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
page 6-13.
1156 N/A
9007
W5W
Here’s how to replace the windshield wiper blades:
1. Make sure the front wipers are turned off.
1157
1157
2. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Wiper Blade Replacement
To replace the rear window wiper blade, do the
following:
1. Make sure that the rear wiper is off.
2. Pull the wiper away from the rear window.
3. Pull up the release clip, located at the connecting
point of the blade and the arm. Then, pull the
blade assembly down toward the glass to remove it
from the wiper arm.
4. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip “click” into place.
5. Push the release clip, from Step 3, down to secure
the wiper blade into place.
3. Pull up the release clip, located at the connecting
point of the blade and the arm. Then, pull the
blade assembly down toward the glass to remove it
from the wiper arm.
4. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip “click” into place.
5. Push the release clip, from Step 3, down to secure
the wiper blade into place.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN
shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the
U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 60 percent as high as it is wide.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
When to Check
• Reduced fuel economy
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget
to check the compact spare tire, it should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-73.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check
for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for
page 5-60 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it is
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-63.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
{CAUTION:
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size,
brand, and type of tires on all wheels. It is all
right to drive with your compact spare
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the
tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an
MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 5-48 for additional information.
temporarily, as it was developed for use on your
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes; traction
control; and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. This label
is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for
proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
{CAUTION:
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on the
front tires.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The spare tire is located under the load floor in the
rear cargo area. You may need to remove the
rear compartment storage panel/cover and/or the table
to access the load floor. See Rear Compartment
page 2-40 for more information.
To access the spare tire and tools, do the following:
2. Remove the bolt retaining the spare tire.
4. Locate the jack and wheel wrench, which are
located on the driver’s side of the rear cargo
area, behind an access door. Pull out the access
door to reach them.
1. Lift the load floor up and pull it out of the vehicle
and set it aside.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the wing-bolt
on the jack and then
remove it.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
You must take off the wheel cover or hubcap,
if equipped, to reach the wheel bolts.
1. Loosen all five
hex-shaped plastic
caps by turning
the wheel wrench
counterclockwise.
Do not try to remove
plastic caps from
the cover or
6. Remove the hook and loop fastener straps holding
the bag containing the wheel wrench. Remove the
wheel wrench from the bag.
center cap.
7. Fold out the socket portion of the wrench from the
handle.
2. Pull the cover or center cap away from the wheel.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
nuts. Do not remove them yet.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
rotate the wheel wrench clockwise. That will raise
the lift head a little.
5. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
6. Find the arrow on the plastic lower body panel.
Position the jack head under the metal jacking
flange and not the plastic lower body panel.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the jack head positioned correctly on the
metal jacking flange, it should look like this from
underneath.
Do not lift the vehicle using the plastic lower body
panel.
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the road tire to
clear the ground.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
10. Remove the flat tire.
11. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
13. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand
until the wheel is held against the hub.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{CAUTION:
sequence, as shown.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
16. Lower the jack all the way and remove the jack
from under the vehicle.
17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel
wrench.
When reinstalling the full plastic covers or center caps on
the full-size tire, tighten all five plastic caps hand snug
with the aid of the wheel wrench and tighten them with
the wheel wrench an additional one-quarter of a turn.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
page 5-89 for the wheel nut torque specification.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the cargo
area until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the flat or spare tire and tools, do the following:
1. Place the wheel wrench into the bag.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
2. Use the hook and loop fastener straps to secure
the bag to the jack.
{CAUTION:
3. Install the jack in the
left side panel of cargo
area and secure
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
with the wing bolt.
4. Remove the wheel stow rod from the left side of the
floor compartment.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
5. Screw the threaded wheel stow rod onto the spare
tire bracket. The final position of the wheel stow rod
must be rotated to the farthest forward position.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
6. Replace the rear compartment storage panel/cover
and/or table load floor over the wheel stow rod
through the hole in the floor.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
7. Place the flat, or damaged tire, face down, on the
load floor with the threaded wheel stow rod sticking
up through the center hole of the wheel.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
8. Install the nut onto the wheel stow rod and tighten.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners
on surfaces for which they were not intended.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
Your GM dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
If the vehicle has the Ultra Lux® suede fabric, follow the
listed procedures except do not use any solvents or
dry cleaning products.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can, before they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains
are stubborn.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Most stains can be removed with club soda water.
To clean, use the following instructions:
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean,
soft white cloth. Do not apply spray directly to
the fabric.
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft white cloth.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
For solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft white cloth.
Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry clean, soft white cloth.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the
club soda water instructions given earlier in this
section.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry clean, soft white cloth.
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee, tea, milk,
fruit, fruit juice, jelly, cheese, chocolate, vomit, urine,
and blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water
and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking
soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Let dry.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner in an inconspicuous area to
make sure the cleaner does not affect the color of
the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot the stain with a clean,
soft white cloth.
For solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
{CAUTION:
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-78.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning
liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Tires
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer’s
body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Removes dust,
Odor Eliminator
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed.
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by fuses. This greatly reduces the
chance of circuit overload and fire caused by
electrical problems.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
There are two fuse blocks — the underhood fuse block,
and the instrument panel fuse block.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
To identify and check fuses and relays, refer to the
Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface of the
fuse panel door.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
LOCK/MIRROR Door Lock, Power Mirror
CRUISE
EPS
Cruise Control System
Electric Power Steering
IGN 1
Switches, Instrument Panel Cluster
PRNDL/
PWR TRN
PRNDL/Powertrain
BCM (IGN)
AIRBAG
Body Control Module
Airbag System
Body Control Module, Inside
Rearview Mirror
BCM/ISRVM
TURN
Turn Signals
HTD SEATS Heated Seats
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger’s side of the instrument panel.
Body Control Module, Heating,
BCM/HVAC
Ventilation and Air Conditioning
Hazard Warning Flashers
Radio
HZRD
RADIO
PARK
Parking Lamps
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
Body Control Module, Instrument
Panel Cluster
BCM/CLSTR
INT LTS/
Interior Lights/OnStar®
Door Locks
ONSTAR®
DR LCK
Relays
Usage
PARK LAMP Parking Lamps Relay
HVAC
BLOWER
Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning Blower Motor
DR LCK
Door Locks Relay
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment.
PASS DR
UNLOCK
Passenger Door Unlock Relay
for more information on location.
DRV DR
UNLCK
Driver Door Unlock Relay
HEAD LAMP Headlamps
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
HTD SEATS
Heated Seats
Engine Control Module, Transaxle
Control Module
ECM/TCM
HVAC
BLOWER
Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
Blower Control
AUX OUTLETS Accessory Power Outlets
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
PREM AUD
ABS PWR
RR WIPER
FRT WIPER
SUNROOF
ETC
Premium Audio System, Amplifier
Anti-lock Brake System
Rear Window Wiper
Front Window Wiper
Sunroof
INJ
Fuel Injectors
PWR TRAIN
FUEL PUMP
A/C DIODE
TRAILER
BRAKE
Powertrain
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioning Diode
Trailer Lighting
Brake System
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Horn
Electronic Throttle Control
Power Windows
PWR WDW
A/C CLUTCH
EMISS
Air Conditioning Clutch
Emissions
RH HDLP
HORN
ENG IGN
CIGAR
Engine Ignition
BACKUP
BATT FEED
ABS
Back-up Lamps
Battery
Cigarette Lighter
LH HDLP
Driver’s Side Headlamp
Anti-lock Brake System
COOL FAN HI Cooling Fan High
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Relays
HORN
Usage
COOL FAN LO Cooling Fan Low
Horn Relay
RR DEFOG
ABS
Rear Window Defogger
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps Relay
Fuel Pump Relay
Anti-lock Brake System
Fog Lamps
FUEL PUMP
FOG LP
IGN
STARTER
RELAY
Starter Relay
Ignition Switch
REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger Relay
FOG LP Fog Lamp Relay
COOL FAN LO Cooling Fan Low Relay
Relays
ENG MAIN
RR WIPER
FRT WIPER
PWR WDW
Usage
Engine Relay
A/C CLUTCH
Air Conditioning Clutch Relay
Rear Window Wiper Relay
Front Window Wiper Relay
Power Windows Relay
Circuit Breaker
Usage
POWER
SEATS
Power Seats
COOL FAN HI Cooling Fan High Relay
WIPER
Wiper System Relay
SYSTEM
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
10.5 qt
4.0 qt
Metric
9.9 L
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
3.8 L
16.6 gal
4.5 qt
62.8 L
4.2 L
Transaxle Fluid
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
3.4L V6
F
Automatic
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, you should have your GM Goodwrench®
dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the change engine oil message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the change engine oil message comes on,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if
you are driving under the best conditions, the engine
oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service
is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
GM parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the change
engine oil message comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to
reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid
(severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transaxle fluid
(normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc
brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.
Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or cracks.
Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel
cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor
and release pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding
seats, and liftgate hinges. More frequent lubrication may
be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear. Inspect power steering cables for
proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
the filter may require replacement more often.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
Owner Checks and Services
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
(j) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
details.
Tire Wear Inspection
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-54.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-21 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper
fluid if necessary.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-22.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Use only T-IV Automatic Transmission
Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,
in Canada 22689186). See Automatic
Automatic
Transaxle
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Carrier
Assembly —
Differential
(Rear Drive
Module) and
Transfer Case
(Power
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
VERSATRAK® Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378514,
in Canada 88901045).
Engine Oil
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all
the requirements for your vehicle.
To determine the proper viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine,
Transfer Unit)
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-21.
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and
Release Pawl
Engine Coolant
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hinges, Rear (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Folding Seat in Canada 10953474).
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Dielectric Silicone Grease
Weatherstrip
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
Conditioning
in Canada 992887).
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
22676970
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
—
25010792
PF47
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Replacement Battery
15781507
CF137
75-6YR
41-101
15104967
Spark Plugs
12568387
Windshield Wiper Blades
Driver’s Side – 24 inches (60.0 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 19 inches (47.5 cm)
Rear – 11 inches (28.0 cm)
22703508
22703507
89025824
—
—
—
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help,
contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of
Canada Customer Communication Centre by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding
vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Customer Assistance Offices
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Chevrolet, refer to the addresses below.
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’s
Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA,
(1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year
to speak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
representative.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Description of the problem.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone
call away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872), text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for
new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when,
in Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become
excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Transportation Options
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses may
be available, for up to a maximum of five days.
In addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses may be available, up to a five-day maximum.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Program Information
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called
event data recorders (EDR).
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to engine
speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. This information has been
used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be
used to improve crash performance of future vehicles
and driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not record sounds,
such as conversation of vehicle occupants.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known.
Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts.
Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states with
“no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a private
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you
will have to feel comfortable with their work for a
long time.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Service Manuals
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
General Motors. Please call the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving (cont.)
Engine (cont.)
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-72
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-29
Tires (cont.)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
